Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
16to list them.
6344985d 17
d5483ab1
GM
18** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
19Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if they these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
20
21** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
22Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
23
24** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
25support 64-bit executables. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
1fa28578
GM
26\f
27* Changes in Emacs 21.1
28
f0298744
DL
29** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
30displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
31menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
32menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
33
9a8d84ca
DL
34** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
35a version-dependent component.
36
d76c03ea
GM
37** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
38Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
39will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
40character is still bound as before.
41
3b4fa1b2
DL
42** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
43using that menu.
44
40e857ea
DL
45** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
46suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to executable-chmod.
47
c08398de
DL
48** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
49buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
50contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
51by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
52insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
53the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
54Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
55
3d6cd763
GM
56** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
57coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
58escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
59such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
60recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 61always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 62read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
63(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
64RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 65
0b8a3a6d
DL
66** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
67environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
68
69** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
70point in a pop-up window.
71
72** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
73displays all characters in that character set.
74
75** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
76coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
77
5cb6a58e
SM
78** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
79on the context.
80
a1b8d58b
GM
81** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
82
6e417ca5
DL
83** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
84been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
85
5898e075
DL
86** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
87`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
88indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
89indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
90
abfcc168
GM
91** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
92sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 93(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
94You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
95
cc181e95
GM
96** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
97on the display using several methods
98
99- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
100a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
101be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
102
103- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
104equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
105
da4496b6 106- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
107
108- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
109the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
110
3b4fa1b2 111** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 112an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 113command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 114does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 115
176256a1 116** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
117`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
118typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 119
dd0add8e
DL
120** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
121characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
122
699238d9
GM
123** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
124compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
125this behavior.
126
127The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
128compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
129Emacs dump core.
130
131** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 132
7233c5bd
GM
133*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
134whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
135is useful for debugging X problems.
136
137Example:
138
699238d9 139 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 140
100b3cbb
GM
141*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
142visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
143the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
144and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
145visual class names are
146
147 TrueColor
148 PseudoColor
149 DirectColor
150 StaticColor
151 GrayScale
152 StaticGray
153
154Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
155`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
156meaning.
157
158The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
159supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
160`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
161visual.
162
163Example:
164
699238d9 165 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
166
167*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
168specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
169default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
170resource values are `true' or `on'.
171
172Example:
173
699238d9 174 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 175
0d0c76b8
EZ
176** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
177more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
178now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
179
42088c12 180** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 181display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
182shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
183be customized.
c60ea02e 184
31047e0d
DL
185** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
186
b02786f9
GM
187** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
188all frames except the selected one.
189
3261c1d8
DL
190** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
191to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
192
ffe36136 193** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
194the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
195MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
196displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
197
198** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
199MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 200
559cee90
DL
201** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
202read mail from the menu etc.
203
271b4185
GM
204** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
205a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
206
0daee095
GM
207** Changes in Texinfo mode.
208
209** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
210macros
211
212 Key binding Macro
213 -------------------------
214 C-c C-c C-s @strong
215 C-c C-c C-e @emph
216 C-c C-c u @url
217 C-c C-c q @quotation
218 C-c C-c m @email
219
559cee90
DL
220** Changes in Outline mode.
221
222There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
223`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
224the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
225
404fa7d6
DL
226** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
227groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
228
8964fec7
SM
229** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
230or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
231several other special buffers.
232
39783d73
WP
233** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
234under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
235.emacs file.
236
237The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
238determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
239
d35fce81
GM
240** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
241abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
242`directory-abbrev-alist'.
243
df5a1902
GM
244** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
245is running in batch mode. For example,
246
247 (message "%s" (read t))
248
249will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
250to standard output.
251
a933dad1
DL
252** Faces and frame parameters.
253
254There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
255Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
256`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
257`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
258sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
259for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
260parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
261
262Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
263`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 264`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
265`default' face and vice versa.
266
f77a4a8a
GM
267** New face `menu'.
268
269The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
270Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
271attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
272
a933dad1
DL
273** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
274
275The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
276colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
277correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
278the screen gamma of a frame's display.
279
280PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
281in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
282color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
283
284The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
285`ScreenGamma'.
286
287** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
288
289The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
290Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
291oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
292of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
293the text.
294
295** Emacs has a new face implementation.
296
297The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
298font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
299height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
300These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
301specify a font.
302
303Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
304These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
305under Lisp changes, below.
306
307** New default font is Courier 12pt.
308
309** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
310its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
311it is hollow.
312
313** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
314truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
315foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
316customizing face `fringe'.
317
318** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
319can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
320
321** LessTif support.
322
323Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
324need a version 0.88.1 or later.
325
326** Toolkit scroll bars.
327
328Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
329LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
330configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
331bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
332bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
333Emacs.
334
335When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
336Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
337Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
338Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
339define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
340`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
341
342Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
343a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
344directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
345different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
346system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
347add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
348
349The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
350`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
351This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
352image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
353Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
354
355** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
356
357When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
358widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
359Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
360
361** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
362
363When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
364whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
365defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
366highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
367displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
368whitespace.
369
370** Busy-cursor.
371
372Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
373display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
374
375** Blinking cursor
376
377M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
378terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
379and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
380the group `cursor'.
381
382** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
383
384This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
385generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
386See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
387details.
388
389Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
390have to do anything to activate it.
391
392** Tabs and variable-width text.
393
394Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
395defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
396independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
397Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
398
399** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
400
401*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
402
403 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
404
79dd1637
RS
405The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
406LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 407
79dd1637
RS
408*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
409LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
410
411** Hscrolling in C code.
412
cc181e95
GM
413Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
414`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
415customized.
a933dad1
DL
416
417** Tool bar support.
418
419Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
420how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
421
422** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
423
424Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
425mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
426line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
427about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
428in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
429
430Currently, the following actions have been defined:
431
432- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
433buffers.
434
435- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
436M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
437
438- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
439
559cee90 440- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
441toggles the read-only status.
442
443- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
444
445** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
446
447When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 448from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
449non-nil.
450
451** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
452
453Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
454Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
455the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
456italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
457Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
458attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
459on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
460
461** Sound support
462
2f516940 463Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 464driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 465supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1
DL
466
467** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
468the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
469forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
470value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
471users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
472even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
473
474The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
475
476** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
477
478As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
479drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
480`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
481
482** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
483bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
484
485This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
486`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
487variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
488
489** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
490
491When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
492value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
493number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
494fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
495
496When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
497value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
498number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
499fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
500
501** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
502notably at the end of lines.
503
504All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
505spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
506
eee54b0e
DL
507There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
508
a933dad1
DL
509** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
510query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
511after each match to get the replacement text.
512
d5483ab1
GM
513** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
514you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0
GM
515
516** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's
517you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
518lisp-complete-symbol.
519
a933dad1
DL
520** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
521
163ea954
RS
522If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
523longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
524it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
525window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
526
527- User option: max-mini-window-height
528
529Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
530fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
531specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
532
533Default is 0.25.
534
2f72fd2f
GM
535** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
536
0d43b60d
GM
537** Changes to hideshow.el
538
539Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
540selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
541
542*** Generalized block selection and traversal
543
544A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
545(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
546which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
547`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
548point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
549(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
550
551If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
552i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
553backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
554the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
555
556*** Isearch support for updating mode line
557
558During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
559blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
560line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
561portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
562is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
563
564To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
565something like this in your .emacs.
566
567 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
568 (lambda ()
569 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
570
559cee90
DL
571** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
572
573If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
574entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
575log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
576
577New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
578buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
579
580Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
581if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
582
583The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
584expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
585cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
586a file.
587
3476b54a
GM
588** Changes in Font Lock
589
590*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
591font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
592mode.
593
b3b98592
GM
594** Comint (subshell) changes
595
596Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
597and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
598
599The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
600buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
601buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
602
603The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
604M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
605the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
606
31fc5d15
GM
607Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and
608scheme-interaction-mode now highlight user input, and support choosing
609previous input with mouse-2. To control this feature, see the
610user-option `comint-highlight-input'.
611
e26cec67
GM
612** Changes to Rmail mode
613
c0510d27
GM
614*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
615set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
616receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
617recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
618`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
619as correspondent.
620
621Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
622mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 623regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 624
3b55acc9
GM
625*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
626to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
627Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
628with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
629for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
630
6a1950ec
GM
631*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
632like `j'.
633
5bb6f079
RS
634*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
635specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 636digest message.
e26cec67 637
993d8b7d
DL
638*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
639in which folder to put messages automatically.
640
400a1ed0
GM
641** Changes to TeX mode
642
643The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
644`latex-mode'.
645
a933dad1
DL
646** Changes to RefTeX mode
647
648*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
649 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
650 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
651 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
652 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
653 can be edited from that buffer.
654
655*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
656 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
657 `A' to use all marked entries).
658
659*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
660 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
661
662*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
663 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
664 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
665 been cited.
666
38de9631
GM
667** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
668The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
669semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
670in column 1 are always made leaves.
671
a933dad1
DL
672** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
673has the following new features:
674
675*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
676may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
677to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
678time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
679
680*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
681feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
682file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
683compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
684pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
685defaults to 1.
686
b675095c
GM
687** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
688file names.
689
a933dad1
DL
690** Tooltips.
691
692Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
693mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
694can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
695
696Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
697variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
698the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
699tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
700
701** Customize changes
702
703*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
704`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
705cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
706
707*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
708Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
709default).
710
0ae51efb
GM
711*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
712between custom options. Example:
713
714 (defcustom default-input-method nil
715 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
716 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
717 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
718 :group 'mule
719 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
720 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
721
722This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
723current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
724first in a custom-set-variables statement.
725
a933dad1
DL
726** New features in evaluation commands
727
5e03eb84 728*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
729modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
730print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
731customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
732eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
733
5e03eb84
GM
734*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
735code when called with a prefix argument.
736
a933dad1
DL
737** Dired changes
738
739*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
740command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
741is, delete only empty directories.
742
743*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
744command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
745copy directories recursively.
746
f6737cde
GM
747*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
748in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
749the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
750
2f72fd2f
GM
751*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
752replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
753directory.
754
7381ae05
MB
755*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
756a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
757This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
758will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
759accurate or inaccurate as it is.
760
e024b101
GM
761*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
762from ls switches.
763
a933dad1
DL
764** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
765use the -f option when sending mail.
766
b1c609b1
GM
767** CC mode changes.
768
769Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
770current user setups (although it's believed that these
771incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
772However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
773back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
774compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
775release.
776
7972fcfc
GM
777*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
778This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
779of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
780non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
781want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
782have to bother.
783
784Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
785situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 786and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
787If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
788the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
789by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
790
b1c609b1
GM
791*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
792When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
793variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
794take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
795is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
796settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
797possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
798Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
799
800By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
801special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
802the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
803of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
804above.
805
806Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
807when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
808function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
809call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
810then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
811values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
812only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
813function documentation for more info.
814
815The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
816especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
817with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
818intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
819such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
820is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
821configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
822global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
823
824(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
825
826**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
827This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
828
829This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
830variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
831completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
832the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
833empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
834style system.
835
836**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
837In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
838c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
839as far as possible.
840
841*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
842CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
843surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
844chapter about this in the manual.
845
846**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
847The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
848recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
849primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
850adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
851
852**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
853This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
854c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
855
856**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
857This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
858
859It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
860Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
861A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
862inside CC Mode.
863
864Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
865causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
866the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
867available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
868cc-mode/).
869
870**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
871The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
872specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
873literals.
874
875**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
876It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
877prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
878you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
879this function.
880
881*** Fixes to IDL mode.
882It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
883to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
884struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
885Thanks to Eric Eide.
886
887*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
888It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
889opening braces hangs and when they don't.
890
891**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
892
893*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
894See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
895better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
896and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
897
898*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
899previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
900the column specified by comment-column.
901
902*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
903In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
904is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
905prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
906contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
907don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
908
909*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
910instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
911arguments.
912
913*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
914
915*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
916c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
917c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
918variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
919Provan).
920
921*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
922
c407c570
GM
923** Makefile mode changes
924
925*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
926
927*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
928Fontlock mode is active.
929
87be76f6
GM
930** Isearch changes
931
3353ef5a
GM
932*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
933so that searches can be resumed.
934
935*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
936respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
937that started the search.
938
87be76f6 939*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
940selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
941
87be76f6
GM
942*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
943
d35fce81 944Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
945`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
946search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
947before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
948highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
949`secondary-selection'.
950
951The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
952will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
953Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
954using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
955usual snappy response.
956
957If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
958matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
959set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
960isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
961
35384f06
GM
962** Changes in sort.el
963
964The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 965as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
966new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
967numeric base.
87be76f6 968
d7b511c4
GM
969** Changes to Ange-ftp
970
971*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
972names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
973sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
974
d7b511c4
GM
975*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
976ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
977
4b9347b3
GM
978** Shell script mode changes.
979
980Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
981derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
982sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
983
79214ddf
FP
984** Etags changes.
985
986*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
987
aca0be23 988*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
989possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
990{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
991This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
992a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 993
79214ddf
FP
994*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
995declarations when given the --declarations option.
996
997*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 998"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
999
1000*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1001types.
1002
de370c4c 1003*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1004
1005*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1006
1007*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1008are now tagged.
1009
1010*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1011variables are tagged.
1012
1013*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1014
8dc78b52
FP
1015*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1016for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1017
f6737cde
GM
1018** Changes in etags.el
1019
3f6e4b8b
GM
1020*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1021tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1022is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1023
f6737cde
GM
1024*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1025the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1026
1027If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1028FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1029TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1030obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1031
1032TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1033
1034FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1035List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1036
1037A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1038
1039 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1040 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1041 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1042
1043*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1044of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1045
1046*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1047names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1048
fbc164de
PE
1049** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1050and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1051LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1052
0b8a3a6d
DL
1053** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1054Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
10558859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
1056There is currently no specific input method support for them.
59c1bf85 1057
163ea954 1058** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1059remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1060appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1061
1062** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1063
6f8ea2ae
DL
1064** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1065
c0510d27
GM
1066** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
1067containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1068expression from that list, are not checked.
1069
a933dad1
DL
1070** New modes and packages
1071
31fc5d15
GM
1072*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1073parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1074
5cb6a58e
SM
1075*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1076package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1077be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1078
578979ee
GM
1079*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1080facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1081separate Texinfo file.
1082
dc1178bf
SM
1083*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine
1084or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1085provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS.
1086It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode
1087used to enter checkin log messages.
1088
6abca616
EZ
1089*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1090without invoking external programs.
1091
1092The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1093and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1094`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1095is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1096Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1097
1098The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1099page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1100
5e5dff44
GM
1101*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1102authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1103
1104The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1105the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1106the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1107Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1108even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1109single step.
1110
1111On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1112matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1113probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1114contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1115
f7136ee8
GM
1116*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1117unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1118actually modifying content of a buffer.
1119
bbd9b566
GM
1120*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1121PostScript.
1122
1123Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1124
1125The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1126
1127 ; comment (until end of line)
1128 A non-terminal
1129 "C" terminal
1130 ?C? special
1131 $A default non-terminal
1132 $"C" default terminal
1133 $?C? default special
1134 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1135 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1136 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1137 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1138 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1139 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1140 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1141 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1142 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1143 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1144 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1145 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1146 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1147 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1148 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1149
1150Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1151
99453a38
GM
1152*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1153align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1154determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1155example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1156equal signs of assignments.
1157
559cee90
DL
1158*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1159paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1160
6448a6b3
GM
1161*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1162list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1163buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1164customize the package.
1165
6344985d
GM
1166*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1167
249652b1
GM
1168*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1169replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1170is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1171and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1172not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1173which answers different needs.
1174
3476b54a
GM
1175*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1176suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1177expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1178course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1179reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1180to be enabled.
1181
8964fec7
SM
1182*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1183containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1184
a933dad1
DL
1185*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1186
1187*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1188
1189*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1190
1191*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1192Pascal) language.
1193
1194*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1195the text at point.
1196
1197*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1198
8d54eb69
DL
1199*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1200
a933dad1
DL
1201*** whitespace.el ???
1202
ebcfda83
GM
1203*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1204files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1205(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1206interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1207often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1208uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1209codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1210
1211*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1212
1213Here is an example of columns:
1214
1215horse apple bus
1216dog pineapple car EXTRA
1217porcupine strawberry airplane
1218
1219Doing the following settings:
1220
1221 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1222 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1223 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1224 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1225
1226
1227Selecting the lines above and typing:
1228
1229 M-x delimit-columns-region
1230
1231It results:
1232
1233[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1234[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1235[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1236
1237delim-col has the following options:
1238
1239 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1240 before all columns.
1241
1242 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1243 between each column.
1244
1245 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1246 after all columns.
1247
1248 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1249 each column.
1250
1251delim-col has the following commands:
1252
1253 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1254 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1255
f507826c 1256*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1257were operated on recently.
1258
1259M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1260
31fc5d15
GM
1261M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1262recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1263
31fc5d15
GM
1264M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1265filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1266file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1267
31fc5d15
GM
1268- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1269- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1270- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1271
31fc5d15
GM
1272The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1273dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1274
8062f458
DL
1275*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1276text.
1277
36e24b82 1278*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1279of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1280specific to Message mode.
1281
36e24b82
DL
1282*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1283viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1284with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1285
aaa659ef
DL
1286*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1287interface to access directory servers using different directory
1288protocols. It has a separate manual.
1289
eee54b0e
DL
1290*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1291for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1292
612839b6
GM
1293*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1294
1295*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1296minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1297
399da7e3
DL
1298*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1299with the diary features.
1300
6e417ca5
DL
1301*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1302numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1303
4a27bdfb
GM
1304*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1305Fill mode.
1306
a933dad1
DL
1307** Withdrawn packages
1308
1309*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1310functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1311
3261c1d8
DL
1312*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1313
1314*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1315
1316\f
1317* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1318(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1319
07b14857
KH
1320** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1321without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1322convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1323
9662da0b
GM
1324** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1325or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1326
7fce7efb
DL
1327** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1328function was declared obsolete.
1329
1330** Function plist-member is renamed from widget-plist-member (which is
1331retained as an alias).
1332
f98d3086
SM
1333** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1334It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1335is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1336
87efd256
GM
1337** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1338
1339- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1340
1341Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1342MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1343
67c9a1d2
GM
1344** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1345
1346- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1347
1348Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1349
1350This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1351calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1352argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1353value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1354returned.
1355
1356Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1357if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1358it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1359minibuffer even if it is active.
1360
1361Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1362counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1363too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1364and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1365`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1366entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1367
1368ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1369ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1370ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1371ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1372ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1373If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1374Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1375
dce6b995 1376** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key
f98d3086 1377and event names in angle brackets.
dce6b995 1378
25fa6deb
GM
1379** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1380call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1381message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1382Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1383
3b4fa1b2 1384** The user option line-number-display-limit can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1385meaning no limit.
1386
c08398de
DL
1387** select-safe-coding-system now also checks the most preferred
1388coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1389DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1390
80c05bd3 1391** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1392of a primitive.
1393
80c05bd3
DL
1394** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1395buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1396This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1397than replacing the local map.
1398
4bc7a543
DL
1399** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1400after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1401
1402** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1403
f0298744
DL
1404** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1405promised long ago.
1406
a933dad1
DL
1407\f
1408* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1409
1410Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1411--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1412When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1413so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1414
0b8a3a6d
DL
1415*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1416`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1417when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1418multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1419
1420*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1421`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1422contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1423
1424*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1425changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1426[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1427regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1428the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1429extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1430bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1431eight-bit-graphic.
1432
1433** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1434
1435A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1436a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1437character set as previously.
1438
1439*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1440They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1441modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1442
1443CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1444characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1445range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1446case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1447
1448FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1449name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1450
1451*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1452registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1453"fontset-default".
1454
1455*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1456argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1457
1458** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1459composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1460buffers and strings.
1461
1462*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1463character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1464code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1465have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1466composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1467composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1468The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1469also been deleted.
1470
1471*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1472specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1473`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1474
1475*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1476MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1477composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1478may differ between buffer and string text.
1479
1480*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1481COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1482
1483*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1484directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1485Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1486`composition' from STRING.
1487
1488*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1489a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1490
1491*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1492obsolete.
1493
1494** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1495Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1496character set is not used.
1497
1498** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1499`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1500X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1501
1502+++
1503** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1504are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 15050xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1506
399da7e3 1507+++
f0124b4a
DL
1508** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1509that offset in the file before writing.
1510
f98d3086
SM
1511** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1512compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 1513
612839b6
GM
1514** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1515`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1516from which the command was issued.
1517
1518** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1519`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1520`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1521additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1522operate on.
1523
271b4185
GM
1524** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1525to `window-buffer-height'.
1526
1527- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1528
1529Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1530The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1531lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1532
1533Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1534respectively.
1535
1536If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1537COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1538
1539The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1540obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1541on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1542
1543Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1544buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1545possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1546is currently displayed in some window.
1547
3c30cb6e
DL
1548** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1549argument function's results.
1550
62f20204
GM
1551** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1552signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1553
c0510d27
GM
1554** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1555header is the list of headers passed to it.
1556
1557** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1558ignores differences in case and text representation.
1559
1560** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1561cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1562as follows:
1563
1564 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1565 nil don't display a cursor
1566 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1567 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1568 others display a box cursor.
1569
9a0dd3dc
GM
1570** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1571an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1572defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1573set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1574
d7b511c4 1575** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1576specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1577the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1578text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1579
1580Example:
1581
1582 (string-to-syntax "()")
1583 => (4 . 41)
1584
1fa28578
GM
1585** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1586other than 10.
1587
1588*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1589INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1590
1591 #b1111
1592 => 15
1593 #b-1111
1594 => -15
1595
1596*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1597
1598 #o666
1599 => 438
1600
1601*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1602
1603 #xbeef
1604 => 48815
1605
1606*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1607
1608 #2R-111
1609 => -7
1610 #25rah
1611 => 267
1612
3d4ff2dd 1613** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 1614the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
1615and isn't a string.
1616
3d4ff2dd
GM
1617** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1618a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1619value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1620not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1621
16ce590d
DL
1622+++
1623** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1624
73825616 1625** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1626for a regexp in a string.
1627
1628** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1629`mouse-position-function'.
1630
723e779c
GM
1631** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1632that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1633
d1e103b2
GM
1634** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1635Keywords are now always considered constants.
1636
31047e0d
DL
1637+++
1638** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1639returns it.
1640
7a85e4df
GM
1641** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1642returned by function `recent-keys'.
1643
02b14400
RS
1644+++
1645** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1646can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1647Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1648etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1649mode.
404fa7d6 1650
02b14400 1651+++
8964fec7
SM
1652** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1653and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1654
02b14400
RS
1655+++
1656** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1657has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1658function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1659returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1660been performed."
1661
1662When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1663and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1664hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1665then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1666
02b14400 1667+++
81da8b32
GM
1668** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1669In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1670and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1671
02b14400 1672+++
9e207b90
GM
1673** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1674with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1675specified table.
1676
1677 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1678
1679Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1680TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1681saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1682what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1683
02b14400 1684+++
d7f89643 1685** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1686Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1687
02b14400 1688+++
dde9e75a
GM
1689** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1690removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1691
02b14400 1692+++
9da30515
GM
1693** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1694instead of being optional.
1695
02b14400 1696+++
d20679eb
GM
1697** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1698modify read-only text.
1699
02b14400 1700+++
fbc164de
PE
1701** New functions and variables for locales.
1702
1703The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1704decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1705time functions like strftime. The new variables
1706`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1707locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1708
1709The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1710environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1711the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1712environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1713not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1714`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1715`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1716
02b14400 1717+++
863476d1
SM
1718** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1719To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1720modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1721start sequences.
1722
02b14400 1723+++
ef6d912c
GM
1724** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1725because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1726
02b14400 1727+++
a933dad1
DL
1728** New function `propertize'
1729
1730The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1731strings with text properties.
1732
1733- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1734
1735Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1736by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1737PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1738specified value of that property. Example:
1739
1740 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1741
1742+++
1743** push and pop macros.
1744
02b14400
RS
1745Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1746are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1747as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1748
1749(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1750(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1751 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1752
02b14400
RS
1753** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1754
6c7fd5aa
RS
1755Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1756are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1757
1758(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1759 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1760 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1761 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1762
1763(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1764 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1765 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1766 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1767
a933dad1
DL
1768+++
1769** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1770as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1771
1772[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1773[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1774[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1775[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1776[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1777 space, and DEL.
1778[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1779 and DEL.
1780[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1781 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1782 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1783[:alpha:] matches letters.
1784 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1785 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1786[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1787[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1788[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1789[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1790 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1791 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1792[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1793[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1794[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1795
1796+++
1797** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1798
1799The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1800
1801- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1802
1803The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1804are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1805
1806:test TEST
1807
1808TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1809Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1810it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1811
1812:size SIZE
1813
1814SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1815many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1816
1817:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1818
1819REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1820full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1821size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
18221.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1823old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1824
1825:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1826
1827THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1828hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1829(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1830
1831:weakness WEAK
1832
1833WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1834Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1835their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1836hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1837
1838- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1839
1840Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1841
1842- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1843
1844Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1845
1846- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1847
1848Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1849values are shared.
1850
1851- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1852
1853Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1854
1855- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1856
1857Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1858
1859- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1860
1861Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1862
1863- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1864
1865Returns the size of TABLE.
1866
1867- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1868
1869Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1870
1871- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1872
1873Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1874
1875- Function: clrhash TABLE
1876
1877Clear TABLE.
1878
1879- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1880
1881Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1882not found.
1883
79214ddf 1884- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1885
1886Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1887another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1888
1889- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1890
1891Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1892
1893- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1894
1895Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1896arguments KEY and VALUE.
1897
1898- Function: sxhash OBJ
1899
1900Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1901
1902- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1903
1904Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1905a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1906comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1907and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1908of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1909
1910TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1911
1912HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1913code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1914integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1915
1916Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1917be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1918
1919 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1920 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1921
1922 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1923 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1924
79214ddf 1925 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1926 'case-fold-string-hash))
1927
1928 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1929
1930+++
1931** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1932
1933It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1934circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1935a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1936
1937+++
1938** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1939
1940If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1941#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1942
a933dad1
DL
1943+++
1944** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1945t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1946specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1947is too short to reach that column.
1948
1949+++
1950** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1951now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1952after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1953two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1954
1955If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1956perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1957and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1958
1959+++
1960** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1961to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1962
1963+++
1964** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1965calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1966
1967+++
1968** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1969directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1970small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1971small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1972temporary-file-directory instead.
1973
1974+++
1975** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1976the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1977`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1978hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1979
1980+++
1981** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1982elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1983
1984+++
1985** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1986
1987make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1988creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1989ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1990
1991+++
1992** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1993
1994The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1995on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1996is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1997never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1998ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1999overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2000
2001If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2002that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2003to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2004The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2005
2006+++
2007** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2008
2009Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2010If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2011ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2012result string.
2013
2014Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2015string where arguments appear in the result string.
2016
2017Example:
2018
2019 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2020 (s2 "world"))
2021 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2022 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2023 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2024
2025results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2026
2027+++
2028** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2029
2030Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2031The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2032argument in it.
2033
2034 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2035 (arg "world"))
2036 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2037 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2038 (message msg arg))
2039
2040+++
2041** Sound support
2042
2043Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2044(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2045
2046Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2047(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2048to enable sound support.
2049
2050Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2051list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2052when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2053functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2054sound to play, before playing the sound.
2055
2056The following sound properties are supported:
2057
2058- `:file FILE'
2059
2060FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2061searched relative to `data-directory'.
2062
6fb40beb
GM
2063- `:data DATA'
2064
2065DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2066may be present, but not both.
2067
a933dad1
DL
2068- `:volume VOLUME'
2069
2070VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
20710..1. This property is optional.
2072
2073Other properties are ignored.
2074
2075** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2076
2077** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2078a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2079
2080** Changes to garbage collection
2081
2082*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2083of live and free strings.
2084
2085*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2086strings that have been consed so far.
2087
a933dad1 2088\f
04545643
GM
2089* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2090Lisp Manual
2091
9a8d84ca
DL
2092+++
2093** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2094
2095** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2096image.
2097
2098- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2099
2100Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2101
2102SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2103measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2104character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2105font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2106FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2107
0b8a3a6d
DL
2108** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2109satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2110
2111+++
2112** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2113optional.
2114
04545643
GM
2115** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
2116
2117When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
2118around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
2119at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
2120properties and overlays that apply to the image.
2121
2122\f
a933dad1
DL
2123* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2124
2125Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2126--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2127When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2128so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2129
f6d3257b
GM
2130** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2131to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2132
2133Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2134text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2135is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2136your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2137laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2138just display it black instead.
2139
2140This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2141a line like
2142
2143 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2144
2145in your `.emacs'.
2146
a933dad1
DL
2147** New face implementation.
2148
2149Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2150font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2151
2152+++
2153*** New faces.
2154
2155Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2156
2157 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2158
a933dad1
DL
2159 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2160 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2161
a933dad1 2162 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2163
a933dad1 2164 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2165
a933dad1 2166 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2167
a933dad1 2168 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2169
a933dad1
DL
2170 7. Background color.
2171
2172 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2173
2174 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2175
2176 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2177
2178 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2179
2180 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2181 color.
2182
2183 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2184 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2185
2186Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2187same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2188frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2189faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2190with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2191attributes mentioned above.
2192
2193There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2194definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2195created frames.
79214ddf 2196
a933dad1
DL
2197A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2198have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2199`fully-specified'.
2200
2201+++
2202*** Face merging.
2203
2204The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2205combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2206aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2207properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2208that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2209results in a fully-specified face.
2210
2211+++
2212*** Face realization.
2213
2214After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2215merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2216realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2217available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2218face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2219cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2220
2221Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2222character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2223for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2224charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2225
2226Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2227specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2228being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2229the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2230statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2231
2232In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2233`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
22340x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2235the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2236initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2237Emacs.
2238
2239Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2240`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2241registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2242with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2243
2244++++
2245**** Clearing face caches.
2246
2247The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2248on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2249unused fonts.
2250
2251+++
2252*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2253
a933dad1
DL
2254Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2255given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2256for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2257
2258If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2259pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2260family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2261property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2262an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2263
2264Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2265against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2266match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2267
2268Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2269
2270The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2271attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2272face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2273names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2274that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2275width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2276to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2277
2278Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2279specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2280face doesn't exist.
2281
2282+++
2283**** Scalable fonts
2284
2285Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2286since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2287servers.
2288
2289To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2290`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2291scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2292Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2293scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2294that list. Example:
2295
2296 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2297
2298allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2299
2300+++
2301*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2302
2303- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2304
2305Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2306is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2307string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2308
2309If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2310the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2311FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2312POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2313SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2314These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2315if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2316REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2317the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2318of the face font sort order.
2319
79214ddf 2320- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2321
2322Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2323omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2324(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2325non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2326
2327- Variable: font-list-limit
2328
2329Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2330won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2331matching font. The default is currently 100.
2332
2333+++
2334*** Setting face attributes.
2335
2336For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2337with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2338implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2339`face-attribute'.
2340
2341Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2342symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2343
2344The following attributes are recognized:
2345
2346`:family'
2347
2348VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2349or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2350and `?' are allowed.
2351
2352`:width'
2353
2354VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2355It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2356`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2357`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2358
2359`:height'
2360
2361VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
23621/10 pt.
2363
2364`:weight'
2365
2366VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2367symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2368`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2369
2370`:slant'
2371
2372VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2373symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2374`reverse-oblique'.
2375
2376`:foreground', `:background'
2377
2378VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2379
2380`:underline'
2381
2382VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2383VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2384a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2385don't underline.
2386
2387`:overline'
2388
2389VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2390VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2391string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2392overline.
2393
2394`:strike-through'
2395
2396VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2397striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2398face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2399is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2400
2401`:box'
2402
2403VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2404around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2405VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2406of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2407and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2408VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2409:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2410the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2411specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2412defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2413the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2414color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2415should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2416like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2417that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2418the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2419box.
2420
2421`:inverse-video'
2422
2423VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2424inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2425
2426`:stipple'
2427
2428If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2429The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2430searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2431HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2432is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2433explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2434
2435For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2436and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2437
2438`:font'
2439
2440Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2441XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2442is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2443versions of Emacs.
2444
2445For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2446be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2447must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2448
2449Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2450`defface'.
2451
2452*** Face attributes and X resources
2453
2454The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2455from X resources:
2456
2457 Face attribute X resource class
2458-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2459 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2460 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2461 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2462 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2463 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2464 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2465 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2466 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2467 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2468 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2469 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2470 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2471 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2472 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2473 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2474 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2475 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2476 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2477 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2478
2479+++
2480*** Text property `face'.
2481
2482The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2483specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2484specification can be
2485
24861. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2487
24882. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2489 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2490 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2491 for face attribute names.
2492
24933. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2494 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2495 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2496
2497+++
2498** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2499
acf3ecb7
EZ
2500The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2501on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2502the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2503default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2504`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2505used to clear the mapping table.
2506
acf3ecb7
EZ
2507** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2508
2509The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2510and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2511type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2512color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2513display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2514old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2515`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2516compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2517should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2518modify their color-related behavior.
2519
2520The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2521any frame type.
2522
8a5719f0
EZ
2523** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2524
2525The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2526`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2527`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2528`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2529`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2530`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2531display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2532the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2533platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2534
a933dad1
DL
2535+++
2536** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2537
463cac2d 2538This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2539
2540The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2541end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2542Otherwise, it returns zero.
2543
463cac2d
GM
2544** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2545
2546There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2547buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2548text-property.
2549
9a9dfda8 2550Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2551forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2552to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2553not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2554commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2555boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2556`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2557functions.
463cac2d
GM
2558
2559Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2560a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2561editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2562
9a9dfda8
GM
2563The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2564
2565- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2566
2567Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2568A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2569If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2570constrained position if that is is different.
2571
2572If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2573positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2574ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2575constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2576as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2577is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2578fields.
2579
2580If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2581NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2582unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2583C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2584only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2585
2586- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2587
2588Erases the field surrounding POS.
2589A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2590If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2591
2592- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2593
2594Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2595A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2596If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2597If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2598field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2599
2600- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2601
2602Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2603A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2604If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2605If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2606then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2607
2608- Function: field-string &optional POS
2609
2610Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2611A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2612If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2613
2614- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2615
2616Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2617A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2618If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2619
a933dad1
DL
2620+++
2621** Image support.
2622
2623Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2624strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2625(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2626replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2627
2628If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2629`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2630AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2631window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2632area.
2633
2634IMAGE is an image specification.
2635
2636*** Image specifications
2637
2638Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2639is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2640specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2641symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2642described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2643
2644The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2645
2646`:ascent ASCENT'
2647
576da55d
GM
2648ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2649If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
2650to use for its ascent.
2651
2652If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2653image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2654
04545643
GM
2655If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
2656centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2657of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2658overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2659
2660`:margin MARGIN'
2661
79214ddf 2662MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2663margin around the image. Default is 0.
2664
2665`:relief RELIEF'
2666
2667RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2668around an image.
2669
2670`:algorithm ALGO'
2671
2672Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2673be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2674supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2675which is intended to display images "disabled."
2676
2677`:heuristic-mask BG'
2678
2679If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2680background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2681determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2682corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2683the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2684be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2685background of the image.
2686
2687`:file FILE'
2688
2689Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2690search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2691building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2692may be present in the image specification.
2693
518df5c4
GM
2694`:data DATA'
2695
2696Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2697supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2698present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2699support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2700
a933dad1
DL
2701*** Supported image types
2702
b246b1f6 2703**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2704
2705XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2706properties supported are
2707
2708`:foreground FG'
2709
2710FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2711is the frame's foreground.
2712
2713`:background FG'
2714
2715BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2716the frame's background color.
2717
2718XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2719case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2720instead of a `:file' property.
2721
2722`:width WIDTH'
2723
2724WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2725
2726`:height HEIGHT'
2727
2728HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2729
2730`:data DATA'
2731
2732DATA must be either
2733
2734 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2735 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2736
2737 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2738
2739 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2740 bitmap.
2741
c76e04a8
GM
2742 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2743 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2744 in the file.
2745
a933dad1
DL
2746**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2747
2748XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2749`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2750found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2751`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2752
2753Additional image properties supported are:
2754
2755`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2756
2757SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2758name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2759name.
2760
2761XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2762add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2763
a933dad1
DL
2764The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2765to display compressed images.
2766
2767**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2768
2769PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2770mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2771defined.
2772
2773**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2774
2775Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2776package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2777are:
2778
a933dad1
DL
2779**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2780
2781Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2782package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2783properties defined.
2784
2785**** GIF, image type `gif'
2786
2787Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2788`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2789
2790Additional image properties supported are:
2791
2792`:index INDEX'
2793
2794INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2795multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2796
2797This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2798For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2799at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2800every 0.1 seconds.
2801
2802(defun show-anim (file max)
2803 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2804 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2805
2806(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2807 (when (= idx max)
2808 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2809 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2810 (save-excursion
2811 (set-buffer buffer)
2812 (goto-char (point-min))
2813 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2814 (insert-image img "x"))
2815 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2816
2817**** PNG, image type `png'
2818
2819Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2820package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2821properties defined.
2822
2823**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2824
2825Additional image properties supported are:
2826
2827`:pt-width WIDTH'
2828
2829WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2830integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2831
2832`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2833
2834HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2835must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2836
2837`:bounding-box BOX'
2838
2839BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2840the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2841files. This is an required property.
2842
2843Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2844lisp/gs.el.
2845
2846*** Lisp interface.
2847
79214ddf
FP
2848The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2849which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2850
2851Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2852they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2853The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
2854manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
2855images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
2856
2857*** Simplified image API, image.el
2858
2859The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2860creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2861can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2862define an image based on available image types. The functions
2863`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2864buffer.
2865
2866+++
2867** Display margins.
2868
2869Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2870and images.
2871
2872To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2873`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2874`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2875obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2876`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2877the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2878of the display margins.
2879
2880You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2881containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2882one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2883string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2884in this file).
2885
2886+++
2887** Help display
2888
2889Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2890moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2891`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2892that have a `help-echo' property.
2893
9662da0b 2894If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 2895is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
2896the window in which the help was found.
2897
2898If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
2899`help-echo' text property was found.
2900
2901If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
2902POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
2903
2904If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 2905the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 2906mouse.
d5aa31d8 2907
9662da0b
GM
2908If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
2909string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
2910
2911For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
2912determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
2913property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
2914For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
2915used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
2916
2917The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
2918the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
2919causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
2920
2921+++
2922** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2923
2924The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2925This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2926
2927The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2928scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2929The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2930scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2931used.
2932
79214ddf
FP
2933 (global-set-key [A-down]
2934 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2935 (interactive)
79214ddf 2936 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2937 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2938 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2939 #'(lambda ()
2940 (interactive)
79214ddf 2941 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2942 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2943
2944+++
2945** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2946
2947Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2948when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2949variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2950is called with one argument, POS.
2951
2952At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2953characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2954as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2955property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2956`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2957
2958+++
2959** Tool bar support.
2960
2961Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2962parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2963controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2964suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2965`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2966automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2967
2968*** Tool bar item definitions
2969
2970Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2971`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2972where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2973
a933dad1
DL
2974CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2975evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2976the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2977property (see below).
79214ddf 2978
a933dad1
DL
2979BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2980binding are currently ignored.
2981
2982The following properties are recognized:
2983
2984`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2985
a933dad1
DL
2986FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2987or disabled.
79214ddf 2988
a933dad1 2989`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2990
a933dad1 2991FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2992
a933dad1
DL
2993`:filter FUNCTION'
2994
2995FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2996FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2997used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2998
a933dad1
DL
2999`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3000
3001TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3002and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3003
a933dad1
DL
3004`:image IMAGES'
3005
3006IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3007image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3008meaning of each of the four elements:
3009
3010 Index Use when item is
3011 ----------------------------------------
3012 0 enabled and selected
3013 1 enabled and deselected
3014 2 disabled and selected
3015 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3016
4ba7246d
GM
3017If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3018algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3019
a933dad1 3020`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3021
a933dad1
DL
3022Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3023is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3024
3025*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3026
3027If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3028resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3029than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3030
79214ddf 3031If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3032raised when the mouse moves over them.
3033
3034You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3035`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3036pixels. Default is 1.
3037
3038You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3039`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3040
3041*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3042
3043You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3044a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3045
3046 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3047 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3048 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3049
3050is the original tool bar item definition, then
3051
3052 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3053
3054makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3055item.
3056
3057** Mode line changes.
3058
3059+++
3060*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3061
3062The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3063that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3064a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3065
30661. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3067a `local-map' text property.
3068
30692. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3070that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3071
30723. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3073is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3074`local-map' property.
3075
3076The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3077properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3078example.
3079
54522c9f
GM
3080*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3081evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3082
a933dad1
DL
3083+++
3084*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3085variable mode-line-format to nil.
3086
3087+++
3088*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3089
3090This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3091`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3092completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3093`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3094line.
3095
3096The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3097`header-line'.
3098
3099The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3100position in the header-line.
3101
3102+++
3103** Text property `display'
3104
3105The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
3106also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
3107`display' property should be a display specification, as described
3108below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3109
3110*** Variable width and height spaces
3111
3112To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3113specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3114`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3115area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3116marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3117displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3118simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3119
3120The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3121PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3122properties described below.
3123
3124The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3125characters having the `display' property.
3126
3127- :width WIDTH
3128
3129Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3130character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3131
3132- :relative-width FACTOR
3133
3134Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3135first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3136same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3137width of that character by FACTOR.
3138
3139- :align-to HPOS
3140
3141Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3142value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3143
3144Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3145
3146- :height HEIGHT
3147
3148Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3149normal line height.
3150
3151- :relative-height FACTOR
3152
3153The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3154of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3155
3156- :ascent ASCENT
3157
3158Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3159used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3160baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3161equal to 100.
3162
3163You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3164
3165*** Images
3166
3167A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3168. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3169in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3170their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3171the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3172`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3173area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3174the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3175as display specification.
3176
3177*** Other display properties
3178
3179- :space-width FACTOR
3180
3181Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3182should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3183integer or float.
3184
3185- :height HEIGHT
3186
3187Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3188
3189If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3190means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3191the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3192``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3193a font is available counts as a step.
3194
3195If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3196as tall as the frame's default font.
3197
3198If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3199height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3200
3201Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3202`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3203
3204- :raise FACTOR
3205
3206FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3207font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3208raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3209amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3210`:height' subproperty.
3211
3212*** Conditional display properties
3213
3214All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3215has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3216applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3217During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3218the text having the `display' property.
3219
3220The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3221`(:when t SPEC)'.
3222
3223+++
3224** New menu separator types.
3225
3226Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3227item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3228treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3229to specify other menu separator types.
3230
3231- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3232
3233No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3234separator occurs.
3235
3236- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3237
3238A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3239
3240- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3241
3242A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3243
3244- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3245
3246A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3247
3248- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3249
3250A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3251
3252- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3253
3254A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3255displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3256
3257- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3258
3259A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3260
3261- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3262
3263A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3264
3265- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3266
3267A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3268
3269- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3270
3271Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3272
3273- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3274
3275Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3276
3277- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3278
3279Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3280
3281- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3282
3283Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3284
3285Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3286the corresponding single-line separators.
3287
3288+++
3289** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3290
3291The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3292`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3293Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3294that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3295default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3296default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3297default foreground is black.
3298
3299The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3300(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3301`ScrollBarBackground').
3302
3303Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3304settings for scroll bar colors.
3305
3306+++
3307** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3308display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3309
3310---
3311** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3312starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3313on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3314line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3315the original window start.
3316
3317---
3318** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3319`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3320now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3321
3322+++
3323** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3324
3325A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3326`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3327windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3328other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3329
3330The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3331fixed-width and fixed-height.
3332
3333 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3334
3335A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3336fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3337window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3338change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3339temporarily to nil, for example
3340
3341 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3342 (enlarge-window 10))
3343
79214ddf 3344Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3345or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3346
3347** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3348terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3349to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3350overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3351horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3352support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050
DL
3353^L
3354* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3355
3356** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3357input.
3358
3359** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3360
3361** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3362
3363** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3364only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3365exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3366(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3367(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3368
3369** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3370been added.
3371
3372^L
3373* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3374
3375** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3376
e33b0397
DL
3377^L
3378* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3379
3380** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3381M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
3382\f
3383* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3384
3385** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3386
3387You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3388Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3389`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3390
3391If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3392is the one that is used.
3393
3394** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3395the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3396Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3397separate from the command's regular output.
3398Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3399says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3400In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3401the buffer name.
3402
3403When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3404output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3405it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3406cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3407
3408** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3409the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3410is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3411created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3412
3413** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3414example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3415match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3416quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3417
3418** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3419now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3420if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3421they never ignore case.
3422
3423** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3424under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3425applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3426of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3427just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3428convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3429part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3430
3431If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3432the same format that was used in the file before.
3433
3434You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3435`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3436
3437** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3438renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3439This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3440
3441** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3442The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3443buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3444your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3445is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3446end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3447Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3448
3449The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3450eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3451control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3452format. You can now customize these variables.
3453
3454** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3455filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3456filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3457enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3458
3459** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3460in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3461windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3462
3463** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3464dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3465doesn't have any effect.
3466
3467** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3468not one per buffer.
3469
3470** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3471use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3472 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3473
3474** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3475To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3476`auto-show-mode' command.
3477
3478** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3479avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3480versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3481choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3482occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3483
3484** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3485cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3486
3487** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3488character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3489feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3490
3491** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3492the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3493interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3494and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3495
3496** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3497
3498The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3499that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3500one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3501codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3502set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3503
3504Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3505from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3506
3507IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3508equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3509a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3510`?' on other systems.
3511
3512IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3513feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3514Unix.
3515
3516Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3517current codepage when it starts.
3518
3519** Mail changes
3520
feab4fba
GM
3521*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3522`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3523appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3524non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3525MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3526headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3527latin-1:
3528
3529 MIME-version: 1.0
3530 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3531 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3532
a933dad1
DL
3533*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3534default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3535default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3536sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3537buffer-file-coding-system.
3538
3539You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3540sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3541mail.
3542
3543*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3544if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3545Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3546list of possible coding systems.
3547
3548** CC Mode changes
3549
3550*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3551modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3552longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3553docstring for details.
3554
3555*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3556symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3557found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3558prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3559lineup functions use this feature currently.
3560
3561*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3562"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3563
3564*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3565"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3566
3567*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3568from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3569symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3570c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3571anonymous classes.
3572
3573*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3574syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3575
3576*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3577inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3578support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3579function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3580
3581*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3582(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3583brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3584c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3585(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3586
3587*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3588
3589*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3590
3591*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3592for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3593
3594*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3595
3596*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3597associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3598This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3599circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3600class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3601
3602** Gnus changes.
3603
3604*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3605added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3606Gnus manual for the full story.
3607
3608*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3609before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3610group, which is created automatically.
3611
3612*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3613values.
3614
3615*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3616
3617*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3618outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3619
3620*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3621`C-u C-c C-c'.
3622
3623*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3624
3625*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3626re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3627
3628*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3629
3630*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3631Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3632
3633*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3634`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3635
3636*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3637control over simplification.
3638
3639*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3640
3641*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3642limit.
3643
3644*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3645
3646*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3647
79214ddf 3648*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3649If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3650rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3651
3652*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3653`a' forces normal posting method.
3654
3655*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3656-- `W d'.
3657
3658*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3659to a non-nil value.
3660
3661*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3662where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3663
3664*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3665has been added.
3666
3667*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3668
3669*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3670
3671*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3672`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3673
3674*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3675`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3676
3677*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3678
3679*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3680been added.
3681
3682*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3683`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3684
3685*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3686updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3687
3688*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3689
3690*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3691
3692*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3693
3694** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3695
3696*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3697options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3698nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3699
3700*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3701TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3702of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3703TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3704can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3705
3706*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3707All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3708but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3709the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3710
3711*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3712the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3713buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3714mismatch.
3715
3716** Changes to RefTeX mode
3717
3718*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3719file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3720
3721*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3722lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3723characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3724removed from the label.
3725
3726*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3727a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3728
3729*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3730customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3731
3732*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3733`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3734expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3735
3736*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3737
3738** New/deleted modes and packages
3739
3740*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3741SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3742
3743*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3744editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3745SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3746
3747*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3748changes with a special face.
3749
3750*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3751this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3752Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3753\f
3754* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3755
3756** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3757This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3758conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3759and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3760check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3761
3762The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3763Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3764distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3765
3766** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3767MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3768controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3769directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3770Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3771on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3772string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3773program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3774printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3775
3776** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3777output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3778available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3779input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3780temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3781program.
3782
3783An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3784and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3785programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3786automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3787as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3788ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3789
3790** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3791a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3792MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3793was not documented clearly before.
3794
3795** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3796This includes Tetris and Snake.
3797\f
3798* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3799
3800** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3801return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3802They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3803meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3804
3805** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3806WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3807and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3808
3809** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3810
3811*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3812It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3813
3814*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3815the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3816integers.
3817
3818** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3819files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3820arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3821file names and attributes are returned.
3822
3823** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3824sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3825accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3826It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3827returns the result.
3828
3829** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3830to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3831
3832** New functions for base64 conversion:
3833
3834The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3835into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3836performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3837optionally.
3838
3839Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3840job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3841
3842**
3843The new function process-running-child-p
3844will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3845terminal to its own child process.
3846
3847** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3848when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3849to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3850itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3851
3852** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3853be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3854
3855** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3856:included is an alias for :visible.
3857
3858easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3859easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3860to move or copy menu entries.
3861
3862** Multibyte editing changes
3863
3864*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3865an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3866make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3867work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3868char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3869 (setq char (sref str idx)
3870 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3871The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3872
3873If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3874(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3875 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3876
3877*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3878region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3879deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3880
3881 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3882
3883This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3884across the boundary.
3885
3886*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3887`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3888 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3889 contains 8-bit characters.
3890 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3891 contains invalid characters.
3892
3893*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3894text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3895preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3896text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3897way.
3898
3899*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3900If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3901end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3902prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3903
3904*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3905compose Thai characters in a string.
3906
3907** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3908argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3909for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3910menus should always use the third argument.
3911
3912** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3913read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3914arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3915input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3916
3917** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3918of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3919programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3920inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3921
3922** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3923the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3924returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3925echo area contents.
3926
3927 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3928
3929** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3930NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3931requested feature cannot be loaded.
3932
3933** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3934foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3935means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3936
3937** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3938gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3939
3940** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3941read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3942unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3943end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3944
3945** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3946the gap of the current buffer.
3947
3948** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3949to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3950current buffer.
3951
3952** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3953facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3954These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3955it back in after any modifications have been made.
3956\f
3957* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3958
3959** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3960the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3961/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3962directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3963subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3964
3965Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3966names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3967Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3968which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3969these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3970
3971Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3972starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3973time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3974
3975This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3976Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3977to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3978subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3979`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3980results.
3981
3982** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3983GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3984that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3985fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3986\f
3987* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3988
3989** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3990including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3991it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3992perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3993
3994** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3995specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3996region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3997further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3998command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3999within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4000are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4001region.
4002
4003In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4004selective undo.
4005
4006** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4007unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4008buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4009effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4010Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4011
4012The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4013though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4014-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4015load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4016
4017** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4018no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4019enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4020something that most users not do.
4021
4022** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4023operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4024The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4025applications.
4026
4027C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4028pasting operations.
4029
4030** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4031setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4032like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4033printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4034`ps-printer-name'.
4035
4036** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4037minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4038any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4039except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4040incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4041hits a new word.
4042
4043Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4044Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4045to be confused by TeX commands.
4046
4047You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4048correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4049clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4050of various alternative replacements and actions.
4051
4052Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4053the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4054corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4055alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4056flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4057
4058Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4059flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4060
4061** Changes in input method usage.
4062
4063Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4064the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4065respectively.
4066
4067You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4068
4069If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4070of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4071
4072The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4073that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4074
4075 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4076
4077 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4078
4079 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4080 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4081
4082 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 4083 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
4084 o When you are using a complex input method.
4085 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4086
4087If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4088input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4089and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4090setting it to t is helpful.
4091
4092The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4093
4094In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4095keys:
4096 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4097 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4098 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4099These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4100environment.
4101
4102** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4103names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4104minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4105get
4106
4107 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4108
4109which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4110
4111Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4112Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4113
4114** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4115at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4116its owner and group.
4117
4118** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4119Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4120
4121** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4122contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4123
4124** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4125which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4126in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4127by the left edge of the rectangle.
4128
4129** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4130increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4131C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4132for writing keyboard macros.
4133
4134** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4135files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4136frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4137the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4138additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4139info.
4140
4141** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4142
4143** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4144query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4145contents only.
4146
4147** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4148confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4149the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4150says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4151
4152** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4153non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4154literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4155
4156** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4157now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4158Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4159inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4160
4161** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4162failure if the command produces no output.
4163
4164** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4165manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4166the mouse.
4167
4168** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4169mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4170function and variable names.
4171
4172** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4173reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4174file-coding-system-alist.
4175
4176** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4177t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4178converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4179the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4180according to the current fontset.
4181
4182** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4183
4184The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4185that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4186nonascii-insert-offset.
4187
4188For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4189enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4190nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4191characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4192
4193** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4194an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4195
4196** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4197letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4198
4199** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4200are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4201command keys.
4202
4203** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4204user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4205
4206Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4207user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4208all variables that have documentation.
4209
4210** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4211shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4212that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4213minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4214it should show; the default is 20.
4215
4216Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4217the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4218of your input.
4219
4220** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4221all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4222recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4223argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4224the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4225Newly added options are included as well.
4226
4227If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4228then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4229for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4230
4231This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4232Customize menu.
4233
4234** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4235the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4236
4237** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4238buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4239invoked.
4240
4241** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4242that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4243The default is 1.
4244
4245** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4246syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4247new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4248(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4249sensibly.
4250
4251** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4252
4253** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4254value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4255two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4256
4257** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4258reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4259for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4260every night.
4261
7464346d
GM
4262** Desktop changes
4263
4264*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
a933dad1
DL
4265the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4266
7464346d
GM
4267*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4268and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4269
a933dad1
DL
4270** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4271read and post multi-lingual articles.
4272
4273** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4274doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4275be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4276outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4277the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 4278made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
4279
4280** Mail reading and sending changes
4281
4282*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4283the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4284changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4285toggle.
4286
4287*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4288now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4289summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4290the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4291rmail-default-body-file.
4292
4293*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4294longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4295handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4296
4297*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4298it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4299is evaluated to insert the signature.
4300
4301*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4302outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4303handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4304putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4305transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4306especially interested in trying feedmail.
4307
4308feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4309feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4310provided by feedmail are:
4311
4312**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4313stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4314there is also a queue for draft messages
4315
4316**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4317be prompted for confirmation
4318
4319**** does smart filling of address headers
4320
4321**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4322the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4323can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4324
4325**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4326the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4327/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4328function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4329
4330** Dired changes
4331
4332*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4333files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4334
4335*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4336run Dired on the directory name at point.
4337
4338*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4339files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4340for a specified regexp.
4341
4342** VC Changes
4343
4344*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4345conveniently.
4346
4347*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4348faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4349Dired.
4350
4351VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4352directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4353listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4354currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4355
4356You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4357then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4358vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4359control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4360on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4361
4362All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4363is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4364`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4365the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4366`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4367
4368The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4369toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 4370VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
4371`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4372
4373Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4374ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4375command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4376
4377*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4378file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4379session to resolve them.
4380
4381Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4382resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4383contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4384uses as well).
4385
4386*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4387command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4388you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4389either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4390branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4391If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4392using ediff.
4393
4394** Changes in Font Lock
4395
4396*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4397are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4398use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4399unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4400compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4401
4402** Frame name display changes
4403
4404*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4405frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4406raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4407when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4408
4409*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4410frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4411menu.
4412
4413** Comint (subshell) changes
4414
4415*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4416subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4417with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4418
4419*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4420
4421C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4422that is, the line after the last line you got.
4423You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4424
4425C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4426send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4427the following line.
4428
4429C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4430which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4431previously sent input.
4432
4433C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4434it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4435as the search string.
4436
4437*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4438automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4439
4440** C mode changes
4441
4442*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4443and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4444assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 4445definition.
a933dad1
DL
4446
4447*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4448(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4449Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4450style is still the default however.
4451
4452*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4453
4454*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4455are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4456them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4457
4458*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4459and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4460
4461*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4462namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4463
4464*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4465makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4466
4467*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4468c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4469
4470*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4471should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4472package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4473variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4474
4475** Changes to hippie-expand.
4476
79214ddf 4477*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
4478non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4479which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4480
4481*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4482non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4483expanding dynamically.
4484
4485*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4486non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4487
4488*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4489non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4490this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4491expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4492
4493*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4494
4495** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4496
4497*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4498bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4499automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4500bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4501against the first word in the title.
4502
4503*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4504capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4505bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4506lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4507lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4508bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4509
4510*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4511generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4512replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4513bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4514
4515** Changes in vcursor.el.
4516
4517*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4518and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4519variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4520entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4521`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4522in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4523
4524*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4525Editing group once the package is loaded.
4526
4527*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4528generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4529vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4530
4531*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4532vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4533
4534** Ispell changes.
4535
79214ddf
FP
4536*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4537buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4538are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4539
4540*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4541A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4542and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4543defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4544include:
a933dad1
DL
4545
4546 o URLs are automatically skipped
4547 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4548
4549*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4550
4551** Changes to RefTeX mode
4552
4553RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4554large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4555re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4556section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4557
4558*** New recursive parser.
4559
4560The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4561entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4562recursive parser scans the individual files.
4563
4564*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4565
a933dad1
DL
4566Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4567partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4568the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4569
4570 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4571
4572*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4573
4574This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4575
4576 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4577
4578*** Using multiple selection buffers
4579
4580If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4581for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4582
4583 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4584
4585*** References to external documents.
4586
4587The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4588documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4589documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4590macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4591RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4592the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4593The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4594
4595*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4596
4597The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4598and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4599
4600Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4601the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4602
4603*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4604
4605The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4606buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4607
4608*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4609
4610The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4611contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4612`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4613have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4614enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4615at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4616more.
4617
4618*** Support for the varioref package
4619
4620The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4621
4622*** New hooks
4623
4624Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4625and citations are created. These hooks are
4626`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4627`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4628
4629*** Citations outside LaTeX
4630
4631The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4632a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4633
4634*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4635
4636The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4637fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4638fontified, use
4639
4640 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4641
4642** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4643With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4644the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4645directories that contain the same file name.
4646
4647Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4648Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4649file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4650Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4651have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4652names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4653directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4654directory.
4655
4656** New modes and packages
4657
4658*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4659It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4660it, but some do not.
4661
4662*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4663code.
4664
4665*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4666current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4667around in a buffer.
4668
4669Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4670
4671*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4672uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4673be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4674established system of notation similar to Chess.
4675
4676*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4677documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4678guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4679
4680*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4681available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4682system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4683simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4684functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4685the like.
4686
4687*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4688identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4689
4690*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4691within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4692used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4693the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4694
4695*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4696
4697 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4698 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4699 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4700 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4701 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4702 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4703 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4704 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4705 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4706 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4707 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4708
4709 Platform-specific modes:
4710
4711 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4712 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4713 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4714 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4715 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4716 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4717 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4718 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4719 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4720\f
4721* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4722
4723** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4724use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4725That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4726Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4727
4728Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4729you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4730consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4731
4732** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4733and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4734specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4735searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4736
4737** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4738multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4739character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4740environment.
4741
4742** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4743take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4744string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4745current input method for reading this one event.
4746
4747** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4748now control whether to output certain characters as
4749backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4750non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4751characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4752in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4753\f
4754* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4755
4756** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4757of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4758
4759** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4760in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4761always increases point by 1.
4762
4763The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4764considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4765
4766See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4767
4768** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4769Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4770default value changed. For example,
4771
4772 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4773 :type 'integer
4774 :group 'foo
4775 :version "20.3")
4776
79214ddf 4777 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4778 :version "20.3")
4779
4780If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4781default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4782is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4783`:version' in the top level group.
4784
4785This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4786
4787** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4788starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4789
4790However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4791symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4792support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4793to themselves.
4794
4795If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4796this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4797values whatever.
4798
4799** There is a new debugger command, R.
4800It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4801in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4802
4803** Frame-local variables.
4804
4805You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4806the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4807local bindings for that variable.
4808
4809These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4810frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4811modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4812parameter name.
4813
4814Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4815Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4816active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4817that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4818
4819It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4820clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4821very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4822through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4823
4824** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4825"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4826evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4827makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4828See the documentation in sregex.el.
4829
4830** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4831is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4832parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4833The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4834
4835** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4836If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4837
4838** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4839known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4840define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4841
4842** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4843when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4844it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4845history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4846
4847The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4848return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4849empty input.
4850
4851** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4852for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4853`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4854Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4855`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4856
4857** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4858echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4859a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4860default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4861
4862** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4863specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4864function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4865place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4866non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4867
4868** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4869If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4870up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4871end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4872
4873** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4874which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4875If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4876
4877** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4878holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4879was directed to display this buffer.
4880
4881** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4882with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4883describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4884other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4885set-window-configuration.
4886
4887** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4888window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4889positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4890windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4891
4892** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4893override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4894look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4895
4896If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4897non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4898map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4899
4900minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4901and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4902
4903** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4904except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4905
4906** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4907USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4908floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4909
4910** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4911to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4912in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4913it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4914
4915** Menu changes
4916
4917*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4918keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4919better supported.
4920
4921The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4922a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4923you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4924can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4925then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4926
4927*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4928
4929In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4930 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4931defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4932starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4933
4934The format is:
4935 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4936 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4937where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4938string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4939The supported properties include
4940
4941:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4942 item is enabled.
4943:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4944 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4945:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4946 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4947 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4948 It should return a binding to use instead.
4949:keys DESCRIPTION
4950 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4951 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4952 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4953:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4954 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4955 keyboard binding.
4956:key-sequence nil
4957 This means that the command normally has no
4958 keyboard equivalent.
4959:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4960:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4961 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4962 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4963 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4964
4965Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4966Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4967
4968(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4969
4970** New event types
4971
4972*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4973mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4974corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4975which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4976
4977 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4978
4979where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4980same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4981indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4982negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4983the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4984forward, away from the user.
4985
4986As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4987
4988*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4989files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4990and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4991filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4992loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4993
4994 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4995
4996where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4997same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4998that were dragged and dropped.
4999
5000As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5001
5002** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5003
5004*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5005any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5006to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5007
5008*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5009can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5010that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5011
5012*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5013in Emacs 19 and before.
5014
5015The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5016The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5017
5018*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5019buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5020unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5021representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5022
5023This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5024as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5025viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5026one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5027will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5028
5029This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5030representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5031(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5032consistent with the new representation.
5033
5034*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5035representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5036about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5037however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5038
5039The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5040nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5041using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5042
5043*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5044representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5045representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5046
5047The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5048loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5049is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5050
5051*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5052which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5053
5054*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5055which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5056
5057*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5058portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5059so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5060You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5061
5062*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5063it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5064
5065*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5066convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5067buffer or string being searched.
5068
5069One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5070[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5071searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5072searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5073obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5074you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5075expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5076
5077*** Structure of coding system changed.
5078
5079All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5080by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5081which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5082as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5083vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5084your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5085define-coding-system-alias.
5086
5087The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5088the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5089access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5090pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5091character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5092safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5093'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5094`iso-8859-1'.
5095
5096Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5097The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5098coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5099(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5100
5101Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5102also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5103are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5104the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5105
5106*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5107proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5108This function requires a user interaction.
5109
5110*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5111find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5112select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5113systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5114a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5115select-safe-coding-system.
5116
5117*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5118decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5119last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5120was done.
5121
5122*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5123used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5124coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5125
5126*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5127return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5128characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5129`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5130
5131*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5132coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5133coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5134converted.
5135
5136*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5137coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5138
5139*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5140character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5141character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5142each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5143either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5144range of characters.
5145
5146*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5147Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5148
5149*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5150in the current buffer at position POS.
5151
5152*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5153input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5154function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5155character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5156event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5157binding input-method-function to nil.
5158
5159The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5160method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5161input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5162the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5163not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5164
5165The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5166subsequent events of a key sequence.
5167
5168*** You can customize any language environment by using
5169set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5170
5171The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5172customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5173instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5174environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5175exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5176\f
5177* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5178
5179** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5180options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5181at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5182tree structure.
5183
5184M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5185user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5186
5187With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5188session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5189in your .emacs file.)
5190
5191** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5192You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5193
5194** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5195This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5196
5197** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5198immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5199kills the region.
5200
5201The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5202delete the character before point, as usual.
5203
5204** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5205on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5206by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5207
5208** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5209insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5210the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5211onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5212history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5213past.)
5214
5215** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5216This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5217in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5218TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5219makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5220
5221As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5222and is an alias for it.
5223
5224If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5225use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5226
5227** Scrolling changes
5228
5229*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5230position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5231
5232In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5233on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5234where it started.
5235
5236*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5237move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5238screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5239does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5240
5241*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5242top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5243comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5244recenters the window.
5245
5246** International character set support (MULE)
5247
5248Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5249including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5250Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5251Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5252features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5253MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5254
5255Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5256coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5257character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5258variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5259into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5260
5261Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5262generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5263supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5264language, to make it possible to type them.
5265
5266The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5267character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5268
5269The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5270to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5271
5272You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5273
5274 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5275
5276Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5277characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5278argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5279already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5280characters for their work until they want to change.
5281
5282*** Input methods
5283
5284An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5285specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5286has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5287the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5288support several input methods.
5289
5290The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5291another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5292work.
5293
5294A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5295characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5296composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5297consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5298sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5299letter.
5300
5301The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5302by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5303First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5304marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5305mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5306
5307None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5308they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5309phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5310converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5311
5312Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5313word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5314typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5315the first guess is wrong.
5316
5317*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5318turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5319
5320If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5321byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5322they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5323the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5324
5325However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5326use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5327includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5328translate automatically to and from either one.
5329
5330*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5331
5332Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5333file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5334sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5335what you want.
5336
5337If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5338example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5339system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5340multibyte characters in that buffer.
5341
5342If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5343character conversion as well.
5344
5345*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5346
5347A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5348Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5349requires using many fonts.
5350
5351Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5352collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5353
5354A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5355the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5356have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5357you would use a font.
5358
5359If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5360specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5361display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5362
5363The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5364(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5365characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5366or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5367and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5368
5369*** Defining fontsets.
5370
5371Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5372chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5373with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5374
5375Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5376of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5377`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5378standard fontset are created automatically.
5379
5380If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5381argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5382FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5383with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5384name is `fontset-startup'.
5385
5386Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5387The resource value should have this form:
5388 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5389FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5390 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5391 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5392 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5393The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5394of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5395CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5396FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5397
5398Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5399last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5400You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5401
5402For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5403font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5404following resource,
5405 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5406the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5407 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5408Here is the substitution rule:
5409 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5410 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5411 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5412 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5413 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5414
5415The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5416fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5417that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5418
5419With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5420like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5421name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5422fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5423fontsets.
5424
5425*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5426defaults for a particular choice of language.
5427
5428Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5429method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5430visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5431already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5432language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5433system for new files that you create.
5434
5435It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5436set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5437whole Emacs session.
5438
5439For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5440chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5441with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5442
5443*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5444specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5445specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5446the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5447coding systems that Emacs supports.
5448
5449*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5450lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5451This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5452After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5453is used for *the immediately following command*.
5454
5455So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5456write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5457
5458If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5459then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5460
5461For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5462visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5463
5464*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5465construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5466to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5467specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5468of the file.
5469
5470*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5471the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5472code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5473translated into that character code.
5474
5475This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5476various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5477
5478By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5479
5480*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5481the coding system for keyboard input.
5482
5483Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5484with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5485some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5486
5487By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5488
5489Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5490input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5491translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5492to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5493designed to work with terminals.
5494
5495*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5496specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5497This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5498has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5499translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5500in the corresponding buffer.
5501
5502By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5503
5504*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5505to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5506It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5507
5508*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5509an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5510command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5511want to use.
5512
5513C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5514method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5515
5516*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5517layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5518remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5519which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5520
5521*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5522the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5523related information.
5524
5525*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5526HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5527scripts.
5528
5529*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5530information about the support for a particular language.
5531You specify the language as an argument.
5532
5533*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5534the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5535first dash.
5536
5537A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5538(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5539whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
55401 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5541
5542 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5543 B big5 (Chinese)
5544 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5545 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5546 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5547 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5548 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5549 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5550 K euc-korea (Korean)
5551 R koi8 (Russian)
5552 Q tibetan
5553 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5554 T lao
5555 T tis620 (Thai)
5556 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5557 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5558 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5559 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5560 z hz (Chinese)
5561
5562When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5563two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5564coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5565keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5566
5567*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5568conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5569
5570When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5571into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5572rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5573Rmail files themselves.
5574
5575*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5576conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5577
5578Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5579for sending mail:
5580
5581- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5582- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5583- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5584 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5585- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5586
5587*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5588to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5589Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5590translations.
5591
5592** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5593of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5594insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5595without any conversion.
5596
5597** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5598You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5599RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5600any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5601
5602** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5603functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5604
5605Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5606Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5607
5608Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5609mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5610
5611** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5612complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5613in the buffer before point.
5614
5615With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5616symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5617you are using.
5618
5619With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5620just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5621
5622** File locking works with NFS now.
5623
5624The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5625in the same directory as FILENAME.
5626
5627This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5628works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5629can become a bottleneck.
5630
5631The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5632does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5633create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5634file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5635rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5636so useful that the change is worth while.
5637
5638When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5639are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5640collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5641tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5642
5643** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5644it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5645show-paren-mode.
5646
5647** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5648selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5649delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5650
5651** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5652within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5653complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5654
5655** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5656it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5657set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5658
5659** Changes in View mode.
5660
5661*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5662Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5663
5664*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5665view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5666
5667*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5668previous state.
5669
5670*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5671scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5672
5673*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5674non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5675not just the selected window.
5676
5677*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5678read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5679turns View mode on or off.
5680
5681*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5682how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5683delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5684
5685** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5686now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5687
5688** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5689has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5690presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5691which version to compare with.
5692
5693** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5694blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5695
5696The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5697is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5698isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5699shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5700
5701By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5702of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5703blocks, all of them or none.
5704
5705** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5706current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5707confirmation first.
5708
5709** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5710now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5711However, the mode will not be changed if
5712(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5713(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5714 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5715(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5716
5717This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5718
5719However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5720these commands do not change the major mode.
5721
5722** M-x occur changes.
5723
5724*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5725it performs a case-sensitive search.
5726
5727*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5728if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5729using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5730
5731** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5732in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5733window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5734that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5735buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5736
5737** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5738after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5739appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5740come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5741
5742** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5743selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5744buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5745
5746** Outline mode changes.
5747
5748*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5749
5750*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5751
5752** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5753you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5754Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5755was already active.
5756
5757The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5758unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5759get confused by it.
5760
5761If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5762set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5763
5764** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5765
5766*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5767conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5768character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5769including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5770
5771The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5772mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5773copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5774
5775*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5776are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5777values.
5778
5779`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5780case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5781`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5782case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5783
5784** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5785certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5786can be. The default value is 30.
5787
5788** Changes in Mail mode.
5789
5790*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5791Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5792composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5793`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5794`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5795behavior.
5796
5797C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5798compose-mail-other-frame.
5799
5800*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5801the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5802replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5803buffer that shows the original message.
5804
5805*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5806with separator lines around the contents.
5807
5808*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5809in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5810definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5811need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5812
5813*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5814
5815**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5816for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5817controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5818Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5819
5820**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5821to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5822/etc/passwd.
5823
5824**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5825to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5826/etc/passwd.
5827
5828** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5829special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5830directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5831reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5832
5833Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5834when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5835be taken to be magic.
5836
5837** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5838files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5839available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5840
5841M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5842(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5843
5844** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5845suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5846
5847In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5848
5849new key dired.el binding old key
5850------- ---------------- -------
5851 * c dired-change-marks c
5852 * m dired-mark m
5853 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5854 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5855 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5856 * u dired-unmark u
5857 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5858 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5859 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5860 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5861 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5862 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5863
5864** Rmail changes.
5865
5866*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5867saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5868chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5869each time you run it.
5870
5871*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5872whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5873
5874*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5875messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5876means to move in the opposite direction.
5877
5878*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5879you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5880
5881*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5882just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5883It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5884can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5885for output.
5886
5887** Gnus changes.
5888
5889*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5890
79214ddf
FP
5891*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5892Gnus.
a933dad1 5893
79214ddf 5894*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5895`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5896
5897*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5898article mode line.
5899
5900*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5901
5902*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5903
5904(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5905
5906*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5907are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5908`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5909
5910*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5911
5912*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5913
5914*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5915See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5916
5917*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5918Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5919used to pick articles.
5920
5921*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5922another have been added.
5923
5924 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5925
5926*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5927generating lines in buffers.
5928
5929*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5930`M-C-_'.
5931
5932*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5933
5934*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5935
5936 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5937
5938*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5939
a933dad1
DL
5940 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5941
5942*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5943Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5944
5945*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5946the native server.
5947
5948 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5949
5950*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5951(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5952
5953*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5954
5955*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5956even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5957
5958*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5959(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5960
5961 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5962 a group.
5963
5964*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5965sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5966
5967 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5968
5969*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5970
5971 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5972
5973*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5974
a933dad1
DL
5975 Use the `Y c' command.
5976
5977*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5978
5979*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5980
5981 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5982
5983*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5984from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5985
a933dad1
DL
5986 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5987
5988*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5989
5990*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5991the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5992
5993 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5994
5995Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5996and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5997from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5998hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5999this issue.)
6000
6001Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6002automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6003particular news group. This can be done by:
6004
6005 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6006
6007Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6008of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6009"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6010system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6011for reading and posting).
6012
6013CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6014 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6015Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6016newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6017there.
6018
6019Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6020default. Here are some of these default settings:
6021
6022 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6023 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6024 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6025 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6026 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6027
6028When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6029the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6030
6031** CC mode changes.
6032
6033*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6034code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6035values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6036this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6037Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6038loaded.
6039
6040If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 6041Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 6042style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
6043share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6044c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
6045must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6046
6047*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6048of the current buffer.
6049
6050*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6051it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6052of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6053
6054*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6055style that the Python developers like.
6056
6057*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6058This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6059just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6060
6061** VC Changes [new]
6062
6063** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6064name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6065directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6066
6067This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6068master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6069developers.
6070
6071You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6072RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6073
6074*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6075other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6076writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6077calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6078
6079*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6080version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6081
6082** Calendar changes.
6083
6084A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6085of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6086for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6087
6088** ps-print changes
6089
79214ddf 6090There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
6091
6092*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6093
6094The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6095formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6096`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6097`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6098It defaults to `letter'.
6099If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6100
6101The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 6102of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
6103non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6104
6105The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6106It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 6107It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
6108
6109*** Horizontal layout
6110
6111The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6112`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6113All are measured in points.
6114
6115*** Vertical layout
6116
6117The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6118`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6119All are measured in points.
6120
6121*** Headers
6122
6123If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6124`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6125margin above the text.
6126
79214ddf 6127If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
6128framing box is printed around the header.
6129
6130The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6131`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6132
79214ddf
FP
6133The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6134`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
6135`ps-header-font-size'.
6136
6137*** Font managing
6138
6139The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6140used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6141`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6142elements to this alist.
6143
79214ddf 6144The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
6145for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6146
6147** hideshow changes.
6148
6149*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 6150C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
6151
6152*** Support for java-mode added.
6153
6154*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6155in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6156
6157*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6158the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6159way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6160
6161*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6162robust and a lot faster.
6163
79214ddf 6164*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
6165
6166*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6167to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6168documentation for more details.
6169
6170** Changes in Enriched mode.
6171
6172*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6173filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6174of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6175use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6176the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6177
6178*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6179distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6180as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6181as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6182
6183** Font Lock mode
6184
6185*** Custom support
6186
6187The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6188font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6189faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6190group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6191your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6192consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6193
6194You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6195
6196*** Maximum decoration
6197
6198Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6199default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6200of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6201supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6202to get the old behavior.
6203
6204*** New support
6205
6206Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6207
6208Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6209support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6210
6211*** Configurable support
6212
6213Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6214additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6215c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6216java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6217list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6218of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6219convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6220
6221Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6222way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6223it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6224
6225*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6226
6227You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6228highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6229for any mode.
6230
6231For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6232
6233 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6234
6235in your ~/.emacs.
6236
6237*** New faces
6238
6239Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6240font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6241distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6242to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6243
6244*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6245
6246The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6247cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6248same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6249
6250*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6251
6252The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6253according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6254the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6255non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6256refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6257the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6258Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6259
6260This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6261For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6262this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6263refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6264containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6265the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6266
6267As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6268
6269Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6270Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6271Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6272new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6273
6274If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6275settings.
6276
6277** Ada mode changes.
6278
6279*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6280If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6281procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6282you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6283stubs.
6284
6285*** There are two new commands:
6286 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6287 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6288
6289The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6290`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 6291`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
6292
6293*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6294is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6295Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6296
6297*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6298formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6299places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6300space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6301
6302** Scheme mode changes.
6303
6304*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6305mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6306for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6307with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6308have any effect.
6309
6310If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6311still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6312scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6313variables as buffer-local variables.
6314
6315*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6316Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6317
133c9e59
GM
6318** Changes to the emacsclient program
6319
875c1439
GM
6320*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6321USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6322associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6323can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6324
133c9e59 6325*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
6326it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6327buffer in Emacs.
6328
133c9e59
GM
6329*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6330use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6331ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6332option takes precedence.
6333
a933dad1
DL
6334** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6335constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6336(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6337
6338** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6339which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6340the current defun.
6341
6342** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6343following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6344
6345** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6346and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6347necessary).
6348
6349** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6350if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6351these register values no longer become completely useless.
6352If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6353asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6354it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6355
6356** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6357example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6358be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6359you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6360
6361You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6362variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6363file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6364revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6365only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6366
6367** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6368since it applies only to the current frame.
6369
6370** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6371file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6372and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6373
6374This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6375multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6376variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6377tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6378instead of just the file you are editing.
6379
6380** RefTeX mode
6381
6382RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6383and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6384different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6385multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6386turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6387
79214ddf 6388C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
6389 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6390 knows which kind of label is needed.
6391
6392C-c ) reftex-reference
6393 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6394 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6395
6396C-c [ reftex-citation
6397 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6398 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6399
6400C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6401 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6402
6403C-c = reftex-toc
6404 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6405 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 6406
a933dad1
DL
6407Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6408commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6409Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6410reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6411C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6412
6413** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6414
6415*** Info documentation is now available.
6416
6417*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6418both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6419
6420*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6421bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6422
6423*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6424(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6425
6426*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6427entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6428appropriate functions.
6429
6430*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6431entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6432
6433*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6434been cleaned.
6435
6436*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6437bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6438
6439*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6440shall be delimited.
6441
6442*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6443bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6444bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6445
6446*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6447field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6448prefixed with `ALT'.
6449
6450*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6451bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6452formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6453documentation).
6454
6455*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6456documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6457for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6458
6459*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6460comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6461
6462*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6463alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6464signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6465
6466*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6467
6468*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6469
6470*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6471from alien sources.
6472
6473*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6474to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6475crossref entries.
6476
6477*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6478region.
6479
6480*** Added support for imenu.
6481
6482*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6483of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6484`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6485`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6486
6487*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6488from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6489
6490** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6491
30a009a5 6492** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 6493
a933dad1
DL
6494** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6495functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6496Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6497as an argument.
6498
6499When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6500and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6501
6502** browse-url changes
6503
6504*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6505Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6506(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6507non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6508customization variables.
6509
6510*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6511
6512*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6513lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6514(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6515
6516** Changes in Ediff
6517
6518*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6519pops up the Info file for this command.
6520
6521*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6522the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6523merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6524directories).
6525
6526*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6527and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6528files in the same directory.
6529
6530*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6531The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6532related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6533
6534** Changes in Viper
6535
6536*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6537*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6538 instead of vip-.
6539*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6540*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6541Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6542*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6543*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6544*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6545color when Viper is in insert state.
6546*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6547Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6548viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6549
6550** Etags changes.
6551
6552*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6553default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6554Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6555variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6556not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6557
6558*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6559
6560*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6561constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6562
6563*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6564recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6565In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6566
6567*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6568C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6569recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6570methods and protocols.
6571
6572*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6573.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6574column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6575paragraph name.
6576
6577*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6578an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6579at least M times and as many as N times.
6580
6581** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6582in files has changed slightly.
6583
6584With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6585time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6586This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6587with old time-stamp-format values.
6588
6589In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6590(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6591This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6592reasons.
6593
6594In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6595natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6596fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6597(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6598time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6599specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6600
6601Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6602case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6603truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6604
6605The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6606being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6607future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6608recommended now will continue to work then.
6609
6610See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6611details.
6612
6613** There are some additional major modes:
6614
6615dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6616m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6617meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6618
6619** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6620copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6621into Emacs.
6622
6623** New Lisp packages include:
6624
6625*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6626
6627*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6628be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6629
6630*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6631
6632*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6633in shell buffers.
6634
6635*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6636See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6637and `elint-defun'.
6638
6639*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6640meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6641ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6642strings or comments.
6643
6644These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6645abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6646you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6647insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6648at these points.
6649
6650*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6651can visit them by short forms of their names.
6652
6653*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6654Emacs Lisp function at point.
6655
6656*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6657
6658*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6659switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6660
6661*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6662
6663*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6664
6665*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6666
6667*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6668from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6669
6670*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6671You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6672inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6673original place after inserting the copy.
6674
6675*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6676on the buffer.
6677
6678You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6679velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6680(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6681
6682Enable mouse-drag with:
6683 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6684-or-
6685 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6686
6687*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6688mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6689
6690*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6691It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6692
6693*** ogonek
6694
6695The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6696Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6697platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6698TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6699ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6700prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6701instance) and vice versa.
6702
6703To use this package load it using
6704 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6705Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6706 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6707 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6708The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6709ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6710
6711*** Interface to ph.
6712
6713Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6714
6715The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6716services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6717these servers.
6718
6719*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6720
6721*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6722You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6723while the real cursor does not move.
6724
6725*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6726for visiting your favorite web sites.
6727
6728*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6729so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6730
6731** movemail change
6732
6733Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6734mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6735supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6736user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6737
6738This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6739\f
6740* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6741
6742** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6743
6744Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6745end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6746Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6747file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6748file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6749
6750To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6751C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6752coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6753specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6754LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6755save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6756\f
6757* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6758
6759** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6760Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6761vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6762Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6763
6764** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6765to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6766
6767In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6768don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6769"win".
6770
6771** Basic Lisp changes
6772
6773*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6774evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6775
6776*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6777be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6778or by the user.
6779
6780The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6781
6782*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6783
6784(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6785(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6786
6787*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6788usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6789its argument.
6790
6791*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6792
6793*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6794
6795*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6796
6797*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6798error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6799include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6800`format' function.
6801
6802*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6803or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6804whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6805
6806*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6807either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6808adding one of these suffixes.
6809
6810*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6811which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6812If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6813
6814We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6815because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6816
6817*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6818
6819*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6820You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6821
6822*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6823conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6824
6825 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6826
6827BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6828BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6829
6830*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6831choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6832restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6833works using `save-current-buffer'.
6834
6835*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6836write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6837of the last form.
6838
6839*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6840which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6841last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6842as the last form.
6843
6844*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6845characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6846matches.
6847
6848For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6849
6850*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6851with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6852Then it returns that string.
6853
6854For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6855
6856(with-output-to-string
6857 (princ "The buffer is ")
6858 (princ (buffer-name)))
6859
6860returns "The buffer is foo".
6861
6862** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6863is non-nil.
6864
6865These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6866buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6867characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6868
6869*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6870a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6871
6872Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6873character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6874Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6875position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6876characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6877 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6878
6879ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6880Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6881non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6882characters".
6883
6884The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6885through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6886"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6887range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6888leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6889
6890*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6891(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6892multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6893character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6894
6895This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6896always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6897
6898However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6899
a933dad1
DL
6900*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6901because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6902have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6903the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6904guaranteed.
6905
6906*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6907between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6908character).
6909
6910When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6911
6912 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6913 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6914 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6915 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6916 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6917
6918*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6919
6920*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6921`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6922more than the number of characters.
6923
6924You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6925it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6926\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6927is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6928follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6929newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6930
6931*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6932and returns a string containing those characters.
6933
6934*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6935(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6936counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6937character, sref signals an error.
6938
6939*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6940in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6941string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6942
6943*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6944in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6945region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6946
6947*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6948the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6949to a vector of the characters in it.
6950
6951*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6952of a string. You call it as follows:
6953
6954 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6955
6956This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6957STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6958This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6959Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6960it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6961
6962*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6963if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6964
6965*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6966if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6967
6968*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6969to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6970not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6971which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6972
6973(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6974
6975This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6976
6977The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6978If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6979are not included in the resulting value.
6980
6981The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6982at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6983WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6984is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6985
6986If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6987place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6988character extends across that column), then the padding character
6989PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6990string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6991column START-COLUMN.
6992
6993*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6994the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6995necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6996difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6997changed text, before the change.
6998
6999*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7000sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7001one character set for each script, not for each language.
7002
7003**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7004
7005**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7006
7007**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7008set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7009
7010**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7011name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7012which identify the character within that character set.
7013
7014**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7015byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7016opposite of split-char.
7017
7018**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7019of all the characters between BEG and END.
7020
7021**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7022of all the characters in a string.
7023
7024*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7025and specifying coding systems.
7026
7027**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7028system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7029of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7030(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7031and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7032as what to do about code conversion.)
7033
7034**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7035name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7036
7037**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7038for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7039except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7040
7041Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7042which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7043to match against a file name.
7044
7045VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7046a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7047decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7048to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7049systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7050specifies the coding system for encoding.
7051
7052If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7053or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7054
7055**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7056the coding system to use for network sockets.
7057
7058Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7059which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7060either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7061service names.
7062
7063VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7064a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7065decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7066to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7067systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7068specifies the coding system for encoding.
7069
7070If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7071or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7072
7073**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7074for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7075except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7076start the subprocess.
7077
7078**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7079systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7080when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7081(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7082to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7083
7084**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7085coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7086subprocess.
7087
7088It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7089but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7090start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7091connection permanently or until overridden.
7092
7093The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7094file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7095network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7096coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7097It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7098system for one operation at a time.
7099
7100**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7101files, subprocesses or network connections.
7102
7103**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7104coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7105The value is a cons cell,
7106 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7107where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7108the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7109input to the subprocess.
7110
7111**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7112change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7113
7114** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7115customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7116you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7117
7118You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7119variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7120information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7121legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7122customization.
7123
7124Thus, instead of writing
7125
7126 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7127 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7128
7129you would now write this:
7130
7131 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7132 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7133 :type 'boolean
7134 :group foo)
7135
7136The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7137two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7138describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7139for a description of them.
7140
7141The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7142should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7143
7144 (defgroup ispell nil
7145 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7146 :group 'processes)
7147
7148The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7149group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7150but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7151to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7152second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7153
7154Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7155package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7156have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7157package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7158first-level subgroups.
7159
7160** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7161
7162This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7163separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7164
7165** easy-mmode
7166
7167The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7168developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7169only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7170predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7171`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7172`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7173
7174** Text property changes
7175
7176*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7177text property.
7178
7179*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7180previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7181place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7182functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7183starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7184
7185If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7186LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7187of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7188position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7189
7190*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7191value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7192is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7193
7194** Changes in invisibility features
7195
7196*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7197hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7198is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7199should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7200would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7201make the overlay visible.
7202
7203During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7204invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7205needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7206which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7207the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7208t when it should hide it.
7209
7210*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7211
7212Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
7213invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7214and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 7215Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 7216manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
7217Here is an example of how to do this:
7218
7219 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 7220 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 7221 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 7222 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
7223
7224 ...
7225 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7226
7227 ...
7228 ;; When done with the overlays:
7229 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7230 ;; Or respectively:
7231 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7232
7233** Changes in syntax parsing.
7234
7235*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7236`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7237obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7238`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7239
7240If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7241is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7242used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7243
7244When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7245character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7246
7247 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7248 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7249
7250 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7251 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7252 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7253
7254 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7255 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7256 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7257 determine the syntax type of the character.
7258
7259 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7260 of the current buffer.
7261
7262*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7263value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7264for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7265
7266*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7267and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7268only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7269character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7270another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7271
7272These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7273text property.
7274
7275*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7276arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7277of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7278
7279*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7280(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7281element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7282nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7283string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7284
7285*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7286syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7287`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7288
7289** Changes in face features
7290
7291*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7292if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7293
7294*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7295of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7296
7297*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7298set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7299
7300*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7301set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7302
7303*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7304by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7305and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7306the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7307overlay property).
7308
7309This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7310arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7311
7312** Changes in file-handling functions
7313
7314*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7315directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7316they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7317is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7318
7319This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7320begins with ~.
7321
7322*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7323it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7324
7325*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7326the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7327
7328*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7329as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7330
7331*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7332character code conversion as well as other things.
7333
7334Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7335(formerly it did not).
7336
7337*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7338environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7339
7340*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7341instead of constant strings.
7342
7343*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7344to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7345any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7346
7347substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7348in the same way as before.
7349
7350*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7351The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7352which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7353
7354*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7355error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7356else, and returns nil.
7357
7358*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7359directory cannot be listed.
7360
7361** Changes in minibuffer input
7362
7363*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7364read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7365additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7366argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7367ways:
7368
7369 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7370 It is available through the history command M-n.
7371
7372*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7373read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7374argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7375minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7376enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7377
7378In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7379argument in this way.
7380
7381*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7382from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7383minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7384
7385** Echo area features
7386
7387*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7388echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7389minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7390after the echo area is cleared.
7391
7392*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7393in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7394
7395** Keyboard input features
7396
7397*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7398set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7399
7400*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7401received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7402by keyboard macros.
7403
7404** Frame-related changes
7405
7406*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7407creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7408hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7409
7410*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7411the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7412has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7413
7414*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7415selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7416value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7417in the selected frame.
7418
7419*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7420is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7421which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7422
7423** X Windows features
7424
7425*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7426x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7427x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7428
7429*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7430The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7431
7432*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7433MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7434A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7435
7436If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7437it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7438
7439** Subprocess features
7440
7441*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7442functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7443automatically.
7444
7445*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7446and returns the output from the command as a string.
7447
7448*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7449and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7450
7451** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7452does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7453
7454** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7455at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7456goes after the other menu items.
7457
7458** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 7459of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
7460around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7461are in use.
7462
7463The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7464series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7465
7466Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7467after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7468form.
7469
7470** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7471is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7472but its hook is still run.
7473
7474** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7475for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7476
7477If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7478regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7479useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7480
7481This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7482are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7483filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7484warned.
7485
7486** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7487way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7488
7489** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7490integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7491functions like display-time.
7492
7493** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7494name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7495
7496** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7497can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7498is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7499
7500** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7501if there is an error in compilation.
7502
7503** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7504switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7505argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7506they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7507
7508** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7509Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7510the *scratch* buffer.
7511
7512** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7513The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7514where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7515e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7516
7517** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7518and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7519It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7520
7521** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7522using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7523variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7524and compose-mail-other-frame.
7525
7526** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7527can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7528full name of the specified user will be returned.
7529
7530** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7531of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7532where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7533in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7534option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7535files at all.
7536
7537** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7538and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7539width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7540the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7541
7542For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7543minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7544with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7545is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7546
7547** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7548
7549** imenu.el changes.
7550
7551You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7552item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7553
7554An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7555#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7556select one of those items.
7557\f
7558* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7559\f
7560* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7561
7562** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7563mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7564
7565** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7566use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7567Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7568\f
7569* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7570
7571** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7572To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7573
7574** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7575conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7576matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7577expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7578word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7579all caps.
7580
7581** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7582at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7583
7584When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7585does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7586as in previous Emacs versions.
7587
7588** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7589non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7590time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7591frames.
7592
7593** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7594if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7595This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7596Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7597accident.
7598
7599** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7600keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7601It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7602line and then executing the macro.
7603
7604This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7605
7606** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7607(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7608characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7609characters.
7610
7611** Font Lock mode
7612
7613*** Font Lock support modes
7614
7615Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7616below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7617hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7618to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7619Font Lock mode is enabled.
7620
7621For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7622
7623 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7624
7625in your ~/.emacs.
7626
7627*** lazy-lock
7628
7629The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7630only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7631becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7632Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7633occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7634buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7635Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7636
7637To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7638
7639 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7640
7641To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7642
7643** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7644
7645*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7646paren and key.
7647
7648*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7649supported.
7650
7651** Gnus changes.
7652
7653Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7654commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7655significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7656previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7657
7658Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7659between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7660
79214ddf 7661*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7662variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7663obsolete.
7664
7665*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7666missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7667
7668 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7669
7670*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7671
7672 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7673
7674*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7675referred.
a933dad1
DL
7676
7677*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7678
7679 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7680
7681*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7682
7683 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7684
7685*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7686buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7687
7688 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7689
7690*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7691
7692 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7693
7694*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7695
7696 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7697
7698*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7699
7700 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7701
7702*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7703is possible.
7704
7705 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7706
7707*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7708groups of groups.
7709
7710*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7711
7712*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7713batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7714
7715*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7716
7717*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7718
7719*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7720
7721 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7722
7723*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7724expiration times.
7725
7726*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7727
7728*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7729process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7730
7731*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7732articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7733bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7734
7735*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7736articles with the `*' command.
7737
7738*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7739
7740*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7741
7742 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7743
7744*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7745
79214ddf 7746*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7747`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7748
7749*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7750buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7751
7752*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7753
7754*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7755
7756*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7757
7758 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7759
79214ddf 7760*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7761
7762 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7763
79214ddf 7764*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7765
7766*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7767
79214ddf 7768*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7769
79214ddf 7770 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7771 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7772
7773*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7774refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7775
7776 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7777
7778*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7779buffer to allow easier treatment.
7780
7781*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7782
7783*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7784
7785 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7786
7787*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7788articles.
a933dad1
DL
7789
7790 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7791
79214ddf 7792*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7793
7794*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7795cited text to hide is now customizable.
7796
7797 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7798
7799*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7800
7801 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7802
7803*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7804
7805*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7806
7807The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7808in greater detail.
7809\f
7810* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7811
7812** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7813second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7814asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7815exists.
7816
7817** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7818as well as lists.
7819
7820** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7821of a given keymap.
7822
7823** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7824given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7825keymap or nil.
7826
7827** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7828an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7829name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7830menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7831equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7832alias.
7833\f
7834* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7835
7836** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7837
7838Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7839This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7840was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7841far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7842pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7843
7844For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7845you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7846`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7847
7848** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7849
7850The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7851do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7852It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7853much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7854chapter of the manual for details.
7855
7856However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7857customization variables take effect.
7858
7859** Marking with the mouse.
7860
7861When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7862highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7863using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7864
7865** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7866
7867*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7868
7869*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7870to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7871
7872*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7873in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7874you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7875application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7876applications, these problems are significant.
7877
7878If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7879likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7880However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7881will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7882other DOS application as a subprocess.
7883
7884Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7885You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7886
7887If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7888subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7889have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7890Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7891separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7892Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7893
7894** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7895
7896This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7897which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7898minibuffer contains.
7899
7900** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7901
7902The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7903It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7904It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7905affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7906
7907The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7908it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7909and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7910when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7911
7912** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7913enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7914
7915** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7916F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7917Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7918
7919If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7920menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7921something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7922the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7923
7924 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7925
7926** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7927to replace the characters it "deletes".
7928
7929** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7930
7931** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7932a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7933select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7934It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7935immediately after the selected one.
7936
7937This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7938made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7939
7940** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7941
7942Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7943directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7944If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7945Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7946recover-session.
7947
7948You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7949auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7950will not work.
7951
7952Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7953normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7954this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7955bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7956now that the bug is fixed.
7957
7958** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7959
7960There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7961when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7962Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7963which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7964
7965If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7966telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7967VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7968the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7969
7970** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7971Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7972is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7973
7974There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7975Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7976enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7977The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7978remain normal.
7979
7980** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7981header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7982
7983Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7984known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7985offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7986Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7987
7988Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7989of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7990a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7991name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7992documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7993`mail-directory-stream'.)
7994
7995** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7996skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7997characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7998with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7999
8000Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8001- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8002wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8003
8004The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8005less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8006headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8007Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8008Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8009fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8010to a limitation in font-lock).
8011
8012External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8013
8014** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8015buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8016buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8017this example:
8018
8019 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8020 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8021
8022** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8023
8024*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8025
8026*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8027
8028*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8029
8030*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8031entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8032will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8033isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8034(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8035The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8036
8037*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8038does the same job.
8039
8040*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8041"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8042
8043*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8044text.
8045
8046** Font Lock mode
8047
8048*** Global Font Lock mode
8049
8050Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8051new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8052font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8053turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8054on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8055
8056For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8057
8058 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8059
8060in your ~/.emacs.
8061
8062*** Local Refontification
8063
8064In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8065However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8066those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8067command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8068
8069In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8070(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8071current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8072above and below point.
8073
8074With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8075
8076** Follow mode
8077
8078Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8079buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8080side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8081they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8082split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8083follow-mode.
8084
8085M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8086
8087To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8088command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8089
8090** hide-show changes.
8091
8092The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8093to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8094normal hooks.
8095
8096** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8097The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8098
8099** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8100recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8101those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8102
8103** MSDOS Changes
8104
8105*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8106Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8107
8108*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8109and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8110
8111*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8112
8113*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8114pressing both mouse buttons.
8115
8116*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8117restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 8118are:
a933dad1
DL
8119
8120**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8121now works.
8122
8123**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8124
8125**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8126implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8127
8128**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8129
8130**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8131
8132**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8133
8134**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8135
8136**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8137\f
8138* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8139
8140** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8141tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8142remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8143this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8144behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8145
8146** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8147
8148The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8149not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8150need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8151be different.
8152
8153It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8154than `system-type'.
8155
8156See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8157
8158** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8159now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8160
8161** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8162that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8163
8164** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8165no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8166reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8167
8168The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8169to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8170like this:
8171
8172 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8173
8174SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8175It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8176becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8177
8178REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8179seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8180means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8181
8182*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8183up if too much time passes.
8184
8185 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8186
8187This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8188If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8189of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8190form in BODY.
8191
8192*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8193a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8194call looks like this:
8195
8196 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8197
8198SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8199runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8200timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8201ARGS.
8202
8203Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8204command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8205command.
8206
8207REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8208time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8209does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8210each time Emacs becomes idle.
8211
8212If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8213idle for SECS seconds.
8214
8215*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8216all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8217programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8218instead.
8219
8220*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8221there is no answer within a certain time.
8222
8223 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8224
8225asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8226within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8227Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8228
8229** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8230arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8231meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8232arguments in between are ignored.
8233
8234This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8235the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8236
8237** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8238/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8239/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8240site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8241version.
8242
8243It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8244version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8245for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8246has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8247and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8248problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8249
8250** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8251.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8252systems with limited file name syntax.
8253
8254Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8255convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8256for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8257completions.el:
8258
8259(defvar save-completions-file-name
8260 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8261 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8262
8263This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8264depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8265convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8266Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8267MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8268
8269** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8270rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8271minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8272
8273** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8274marker from its buffer position.
8275
8276** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8277Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8278The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8279
8280** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8281that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8282condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8283of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8284matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8285regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8286
8287This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8288errors that happen often during editing.
8289
8290** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8291into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8292puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8293
8294** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8295now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8296
8297** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8298a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8299name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8300to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8301and not get-buffer-window.
8302
8303** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8304calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8305being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8306
8307If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8308buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8309property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8310non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8311are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8312property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8313over and over for the same text.
8314
8315** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8316
8317*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8318in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8319
8320;; @(#) HEADER: text
8321;; $HEADER: text $
8322
8323in addition to the normal
8324
8325;; HEADER: text
8326
8327*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8328checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8329lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8330\f
8331* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
8332
8333----------------------------------------------------------------------
8334Copyright information:
8335
404fa7d6 8336Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8337
8338 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8339 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8340 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8341 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8342
8343 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8344 of this document, or of portions of it,
8345 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8346 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8347\f
8348Local variables:
8349mode: outline
8350paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8351end: